Panasonic Sc-ua3 User manual

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes (f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes ( f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Your system and the illustrations can look differently.

The symbols on this product (including the accessories)

represent the following:

For Australia and New Zealand

Maintenance

To clean this system, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this

system.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the

instructions that came with the cloth carefully.

Safety precautions

WARNING!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or

splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases,

on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to

qualified service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

CAUTION!

Unit

• To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product

damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in

cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit

is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with

newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted

candles, on this unit.

• This unit is intended for use in moderate and tropical

climates.

• This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs,

please increase separation between this unit and the

mobile telephone.

• This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct

sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive

vibration.

AC mains lead

• The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this

unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the

socket outlet immediately.

Battery

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the type recommended by the

manufacturer.

• When disposing of the batteries, please contact your

local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method

of disposal.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows

closed.

• Do not break open or short-circuit the battery.

• Do not charge the alkaline or manganese battery.

• Do not use the battery if the cover has peeled off.

• Remove the battery if you do not use the remote control

for a long period of time. Keep in a cool, dark area.

Class II equipment (The construction of the

product is double-insulated.)

Standby

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries

with recycling systems

This symbol is only valid in the European

Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please

contact your local authorities or dealer and

ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note on AC mains lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC

mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug

fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Supplied accessories

Check and identify the supplied accessories.

 For Australia and New Zealand

1 AC mains lead

For others

3 AC mains lead

For Saudi Arabia

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB001149)

1 Remote control battery

1 FM indoor antenna

Note:

Use the AC mains lead that is suitable for your household mains

socket.

About Bluetooth®

Frequency band

• This system uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.

Certification

• This system conforms to the frequency restrictions and

has received certification based on frequency laws. Thus,

a wireless permit is not necessary.

• The actions below are punishable by law:

– Taking apart or modifying the unit.

– Removing specification indications.

Restrictions of use

• Wireless transmission and/or usage with all Bluetooth®

equipped devices is not guaranteed.

• All devices must conform to standards set by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

• Depending on the specifications and settings of a device,

it can fail to connect or some operations can be different.

• This system supports Bluetooth® security features. But

depending on the operating environment and/or settings,

this security is possibly not sufficient. Transmit data

wirelessly to this system with caution.

• This system cannot transmit data to a Bluetooth® device.

Range of use

• Use this device at a maximum range of 10 m.

• The range can decrease depending on the environment,

obstacles or interference.

Interference from other devices

• This system may not function properly and troubles such

as noise and sound jumps may arise due to radio wave

interference if this unit is located too close to other

Bluetooth® devices or the devices that use the 2.4 GHz

band.

• This system may not function properly if radio waves

from a nearby broadcasting station, etc. is too strong.

Intended usage

• This system is for normal, general use only.

• Do not use this system near an equipment or in an

environment that is sensitive to radio frequency

interference (example: airports, hospitals, laboratories,

etc.).

Licenses

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

Fuse (5 ampere)

Panasonic bears no responsibility for data and/or

information that can possibly be compromised during a

wireless transmission.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Operating Instructions

CD Stereo System

Model No. SC-UA3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com

TQBJ2013

L0417CH0

Limited Warranty (For Australia only)

1. The product is warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Subject to the conditions of this warranty Panasonic or its

Authorised Service Centre will perform necessary service on the product without charge for parts or labour, if in the opinion of

Panasonic, the product is found to be faulty within the warranty period.

2. This warranty only applies to Panasonic products purchased in Australia and sold by Panasonic Australia or its Authorised

Distributors or Dealers and only where the products are used and serviced within Australia or it’s territories. Warranty cover only

applies to service carried out by a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre and only if valid proof of purchase is presented when

warranty service is requested.

3. This warranty only applies if the product has been installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations (as

noted in the operating instructions) under normal use and reasonable care (in the opinion of Panasonic). The warranty covers

normal domestic use only and does not cover damage, malfunction or failure resulting from use of incorrect voltages, incorrect

installation, accident, misuse, neglect, build-up of dirt or dust, abuse, maladjustment of customer controls, mains supply

problems, thunderstorm activity, infestation by insects or vermin, tampering or repair by unauthorised persons (including

unauthorised alterations), introduction of sand, humidity or liquids, commercial use such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other

business or rental use of the product, exposure to abnormally corrosive conditions or any foreign object or matter having entered

the product.

4. This warranty does not cover the following items unless the fault or defect existed at the time of purchase:

(a) Cabinet Part(s) (e) DVD, Blu-ray or Recordable Discs

(b) Video or Audio Tapes (f ) Video / Audio Heads from wear and tear in normal use

(d) User replaceable Batteries (h) DTV reception issues caused by TV Aerial / Cabling / Wall socket(s) etc

Some products may be supplied with Ethernet connection hardware. The warranty is limited on such products and will not cover

(a) Internet and or DLNA connection / setup related problems

(b) Access fees and or charges incurred for internet connection

(d) Any indirect or consequential costs associated with the incorrect use or misuse of the hardware, its connection to the internet

or any other device.

6. To claim warranty service, when required, you should:

• Telephone Panasonic’s Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website referred to below and use the Service Centre

Locator for the name / address of the nearest Authorised Service Centre.

• Send or take the product to a Panasonic Authorised Service Centre together with your proof of purchase receipt as a proof of

purchase date. Please note that freight and insurance to and / or from your nearest Authorised Service Centre must be

arranged by you.

• Note that home or pick-up / delivery service is available for the following products in the major metropolitan areas of Australia

or the normal operating areas of the nearest Authorised Service Centres:

– Plasma / LCD televisions / displays (screen size greater than 103 cm)

7. The warranties hereby conferred do not extend to, and exclude, any costs associated with the installation, de-installation or

re-installation of a product, including costs related to the mounting, de-mounting or remounting of any screen, (and any other

ancillary activities), delivery, handling, freighting, transportation or insurance of the product or any part thereof or replacement of

and do not extend to, and exclude, any damage or loss occurring by reason of, during, associated with, or related to such

installation, de-installation, re-installation or transit.

Panasonic Authorised Service Centres are located in major metropolitan areas and most regional centres of Australia, however,

coverage will vary dependant on product. For advice on exact Authorised Service Centre locations for your product, please telephone

our Customer Care Centre on 132600 or visit our website and use the Service Centre Locator.

In addition to your rights under this warranty, Panasonic products come with consumer guarantees that cannot be excluded under the

Australian Consumer Law. If there is a major failure with the product, you can reject the product and elect to have a refund or to have

the product replaced or if you wish you may elect to keep the goods and be compensated for the drop in value of the goods. You are

also entitled to have the product repaired or replaced if the product fails to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to

a major failure.

If there is a major failure in regard to the product which cannot be remedied then you must notify us within a reasonable period by

contacting the Panasonic Customer Care Centre. If the failure in the product is not a major failure then Panasonic may choose to

repair or replace the product and will do so in a reasonable period of time from receiving notice from you.

If you require assistance regarding warranty conditions or any other enquiries, please visit the

Panasonic Australia website www.panasonic.com.au or contact by phone on 132 600

If phoning in, please ensure you have your operating instructions available.

Panasonic Warranty

THIS WARRANTY CARD AND THE PURCHASE DOCKET (OR SIMILAR PROOF OF PURCHASE)

SHOULD BE RETAINED BY THE CUSTOMER AT ALL TIMES

Panasonic Australia Pty. Limited

ACN 001 592 187 ABN 83 001 592 187

1 Innovation Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113

PRO-031-F11 Issue: 4.0 01-01-2011

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Troubleshooting

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If

you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the

solutions indicated do not solve the problem, consult your

dealer for instructions.

█Common problems

The unit does not work.

•The safety device has been activated. Do the following:

1. Press [1] on the unit to switch the unit to standby mode. If

the unit does not switch to standby mode, disconnect the

AC mains lead and connect it again.

2. Press [1] again to switch on the unit. If the problem

persists, consult your dealer.

The display panel lights up and changes continuously in

standby mode.

•Press and hold [8] on the unit to select “DEMO OFF”.

No operations can be done with the remote control.

•Examine that the battery is installed correctly.

Sound is distorted or no sound.

•Adjust the volume of the system.

•Switch off the system, determine and correct the cause, and

then switch on again. It can be caused by straining of the

speakers through excessive volume or power, and when

using the system in a hot environment.

A humming sound can be heard during playback.

•An AC mains lead or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep

other appliances and cords away from the cables of this

system.

The sound level reduces.

•The protection circuit has been activated due to the

continuous use at high volume output. This is to protect the

system and maintain the sound quality.

█Disc

Display not shown correctly.

Playback does not start.

•You have not put in the disc correctly. Put it in correctly.

•Disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

•Replace the disc if it is scratched, warped, or non-standard.

•There is condensation. Let the system dry for 1 to 2 hours.

The total number of tracks displayed is incorrect.

The disc cannot be read.

Distorted sound is heard.

•You put in a disc that the system cannot play. Change to a

playable disc.

•You put in a disc that has not been finalised.

█USB

The USB device or the contents in it cannot be read.

•The format of the USB device or the contents in it are not

compatible with the system.

•USB devices with storage capacity of more than 32 GB

cannot work in some conditions.

Slow operation of the USB device.

•Large content size or large memory USB device takes longer

time to read.

█Bluetooth®

Pairing cannot be done.

•Check the Bluetooth® device condition.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

The device cannot be connected.

•The pairing of the device was unsuccessful. Do pairing again.

•The pairing of the device has been replaced. Do pairing again.

•This system might be connected to a different device.

Disconnect the other device and try connecting the device

again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

•If “MODE 2” is selected in “LINK MODE”, select “MODE 1”

(Z“Link mode”).

The device is connected but audio cannot be heard through

the system.

•For some built-in Bluetooth® devices, you have to set the

audio output to “SC-UA3” manually. Read the operating

instructions of the device for details.

Sound from the device is interrupted.

•The device is out of the 10 m communication range. Move the

device nearer to the system.

•Remove any obstacle between the system and the device.

•Other devices that use the 2.4 GHz frequency band (wireless

router, microwaves, cordless phones, etc.) are interfering.

Move the device nearer to the system and distance it from the

other devices.

•Select “MODE 1” for stable communication (Z“Link mode”).

█Radio

Sound is distorted.

•Use an optional outdoor antenna. The antenna should be

installed by a competent technician.

A beat sound is heard.

•Switch off the TV or move it away from the system.

•Move mobile telephones away from the system if the

interference is apparent.

█D-IN, AUX

Playback image and sound are not synchronised.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 2”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 2”.

Karaoke effect cannot be used.

•When in D-IN source, set “D-IN MODE” to “MODE 1”.

•When in AUX source, set “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

█Unit displays

“--:--”

•Track play time is more than 99 minutes.

“ADJUST CLOCK”

•The clock is not set. Adjust the clock.

“ADJUST TIMER”

•The play timer is not set. Adjust the play timer.

“AUDIO UNSUPPORTED”

•The signal format or frequency is not supported.

•This system does not support bitstream signals. Change the

digital audio output setting on the external equipment

to PCM.

•This system supports sampling frequencies of 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, up to 96 kHz. Select only the supported

sampling frequencies on the connected equipment.

•Try connecting the external equipment by using the

auxiliary input.

“AUTO OFF”

•The system has not been used for 20 minutes and will switch

off within a minute. To cancel, press any button.

“ERROR”

•An incorrect operation was done. Read the instructions and

try again.

“F61”

•There is a problem with the amplifier of the system.

•Disconnect the USB device. Switch off the system and then

switch on again.

“F703”

•Examine the Bluetooth® connection.

•Disconnect the Bluetooth® device. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“F76”

•There is a problem with the power supply.

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“F77”

•Disconnect the AC mains lead and consult your dealer.

“NO DISC”

•You have not put in a disc.

“NO PLAY”

“UNSUPPORT”

•There is no album or track in the USB device.

•Examine the content. You can only play supported format.

•The files in the USB device can be corrupted. Format the USB

device and try again.

•The system may have a problem. Switch off the system and

then switch on again.

“NOT SUPPORTED”

•To use Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”.

“PLAYERROR”

•An unsupported MP3 file has been played. The system will

skip that track and play the next one.

“REMOTE 1”

“REMOTE 2”

•The remote control and the unit are using different codes.

Change the code of the remote control.

–When “REMOTE 1” is shown, press and hold [OK] and [ ]

on the remote control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

–When “REMOTE 2” is shown, press and hold [OK] and

[USB/CD] on the remote control for a minimum of

4 seconds.

“USB NO DEVICE”

•The USB device is not connected. Examine the connection.

“USB OVER CURRENT ERROR”

•The USB device is using too much power. Disconnect the

USB device, switch off the system and then switch on again.

“VBR”

•The system cannot show the remaining play time for variable

bit rate (VBR) tracks.

Remote control code

When other Panasonic equipment responds to the remote

control of this system, change the remote control code for

this system.

Preparation

Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 2”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [USB/CD]

on the remote control until “REMOTE 2” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [USB/CD] on the remote

control for a minimum of 4 seconds.

█To set the code to “REMOTE 1”

1Press and hold [USB/CD] on the unit and [ ] on the

remote control until “REMOTE 1” is shown.

2Press and hold [OK] and [ ] on the remote control

for a minimum of 4 seconds.

System memory reset

Reset the memory when the following situations occur:

• There is no response when buttons are pressed.

• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.

1Disconnect the AC mains lead.

2While you press and hold [1] on the unit, connect

the AC mains lead again.

Continue to press and hold the button until

“–––––––––” is shown.

3Release [1].

All the settings are set back to the factory preset.

It is necessary to set the memory items again.

Transporting the unit

Preparation

Disconnect all connected devices and cables from the unit.

Always carry the unit as illustrated below when moving the

unit around.

Holding both sides of the unit

Holding the handle bar

Note:

•Put the unit on a flat safe surface.

•The speakers do not have magnetic shielding. Do not put

them near PCs or other equipment easily influenced by

magnetism.

•When you play at high levels for a long period, it can cause

damage to the speakers and decrease the life of the

speakers.

•Decrease the volume in these conditions to prevent damage:

–When the sound is distorted.

–When you adjust the sound quality.

Making the connections

Connect the AC mains lead only after all the other

connections have been made.

1Connect the FM indoor antenna.

Place the antenna where reception is best.

2Connect the AC mains lead.

Do not use any other AC mains leads except the

supplied one.

Conserving power

The system consumes a small amount of power even

when it is in standby mode. Disconnect the power

supply if you do not use the system.

Some settings will be lost after you disconnect the

system. You have to set them again.

Note:

Keep the antennas away from the AC mains lead to avoid

picking up noise.

CAUTION!

•Do not touch the speaker cone’s reverberating

surfaces:

–This may damage the speaker cone.

–The speaker cone may be hot.

•Do not drag the unit horizontally to avoid damage to

the bottom of the unit or the table surface.

•Do not put the unit at the edge of the table to

prevent it from falls and causing injuries, particularly

to children.

Except for Australia

and New Zealand

Adhesive tape

(not supplied)

Specifications

█Amplifier section

RMS output power stereo mode

Front ch (both ch driven)

150 W per channel (4 Ω), 1 kHz, 30% THD

Total RMS stereo mode power 300 W

PMPO output power Except for Australia and New Zealand

3300 W

█Tuner section

Frequency modulation (FM)

Preset memory 30 stations

Frequency range

87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step)

Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)

█Disc section

Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm)

CD, CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP3 )

MPEG-1 Layer 3

Pick up

Wavelength 790 nm (CD)

█Bluetooth® section

Version Bluetooth® Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Class Class 2

Supported profiles A2DP, AVRCP, SPP

Operating frequency 2.4 GHz band FH-SS

Operation distance 10 m line of sight

█Speaker section

Speaker unit(s)

Woofer 13 cm cone type x 2 pieces

Tweeter 4 cm cone type x 4 pieces

█Terminal section

USB port

USB standard USB 2.0 full speed

Media file format support MP3 (*.mp3)

USB device file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Digital audio input

Optical digital input Optical terminal

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Analog audio input

Audio input Pin jack (1 system)

Microphone Except for Australia and New Zealand

Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 systems)

█General

Power supply

For Australia and New Zealand AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

For others AC 220 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 51 W

Dimensions (W x H x D) 650 mm x 196 mm x 274 mm

Mass 6.1 kg

Operating temperature range 0°C to +40°C

Operating humidity range

35% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Note:

•Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

•Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum

analyser.

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

0.5 W

Power consumption in standby mode (approximate)

(With “BLUETOOTH STANDBY” set to “ON”) 0.6 W

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 1 4/20/17 4:49:48 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Overview of controls

Do the procedures with the remote control. You can also use the buttons on the unit if they are the same.

AStandby/on switch [`], [1]

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or

vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming

a small amount of power.

BSelect the audio source

On the unit:

To start Bluetooth® pairing, press and hold [ ].

CBasic playback control

DView the setup menu

EView the content information

FSelect or confirm the option

GOpen or close the disc tray

HDecrease the brightness of the display panel

The illumination is also switched off.

To cancel, press the button again.

IAdjust the volume level

JMute the sound

To cancel, press the button again.

“MUTE” is also cancelled when you adjust the volume

or when you switch off the system.

KView the play menu

LSelect the sound effects

MSelect the jukebox

NUSB port ( )

ODisc tray

PDisplay panel

QRemote control sensor

Distance: Within approximately 7 m

Angle: Approximately 20° up and down,

30° left and right

Preparing the remote control

Use alkaline or manganese battery.

Install the battery so that the poles (+ and –) align with those

in the remote control.

Preparing media

Disc

1Press [CD x] (unit: [x]) to open the disc tray.

Put in a disc with the label facing up.

Press again to close the disc tray.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “CD”.

USB

Preparation

Before you connect a USB device to the system, make sure

you do a backup of the data.

1Decrease the volume and connect the USB device to

the USB port.

2Press [USB/CD] repeatedly to select “USB”.

Note:

•Do not use a USB extension cable. The system cannot

recognise USB device connected through a cable.

•Always disconnect the USB device before moving or tilting

the unit, e.g. when connecting external devices or

microphones.

•Some devices cannot be charged as the maximum USB

charging current is 500 mA only.

Bluetooth®

You can connect and play an audio device wirelessly

through Bluetooth®.

Preparation

• Switch on the Bluetooth® feature of the device and put

the device near the system.

• Read the operating instructions of the device for details.

█Pairing a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

If “PAIRING” is shown, continue with step 3.

2Press [PLAY MENU] to select “PAIRING” and then

press [OK].

3Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

If prompted for a passkey, input “0000” or “1234”.

The device connects with this system automatically

after pairing is complete.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

Using the unit

1Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

Note:

You can pair up to 8 devices with this system. If a 9th device is

paired, the device that has not been used for the longest time

will be replaced.

█Connecting a device

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [ ].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

2Select “SC-UA3” from the Bluetooth® menu of the

device.

The name of the connected device is shown for a few

seconds.

3Start playback on the device.

Note:

•A device must be paired to connect.

•This system can only connect to one device at a time.

•When “BLUETOOTH” is selected as the source, this system

will automatically try to connect to the last connected device.

(“LINKING” is shown during this process.)

█Disconnecting a device

While a Bluetooth® device is connected

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“DISCONNECT?”.

2Press [R,T] to select “OK? YES” and then press

[OK].

“BLUETOOTH READY” is shown.

To cancel, select “OK? NO”.

Using the unit

Press and hold [ ] until “PAIRING” is shown.

Note:

A device is disconnected when you:

•Select a different source.

•Move the device out of the maximum range.

•Disable the Bluetooth® transmission of the device.

•Switch off the system or the device.

Media playback

The following marks indicate the availability of the feature.

Basic playback

CD USB BLUETOOTH

Note:

Depending on the Bluetooth® device, some operations may not

work.

Viewing available information

CD USB BLUETOOTH

You can view the available information, such as MP3 album

and track number, on the display panel.

Press [DISPLAY].

Example: MP3 album and track number display.

Note:

•Maximum characters that can be shown: Approximately 32

•This system supports ver. 1.0, 1.1 and 2.3 ID3 tags.

•Text data that the system does not support can show

differently.

Play menu

CD USB

1 CD

Press [PLAY MENU].

USB

Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•During random playback, you cannot skip to tracks which

have been played.

•The setting is cancelled when you open the disc tray or

disconnect the USB device.

Link mode

BLUETOOTH

You can change the link mode to suit the connection type.

Preparation

If this system is connected to a Bluetooth® device,

disconnect it (Z“Disconnecting a device”).

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“LINK MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Note:

•When enjoying video contents with this function, the video

and audio output may not be synchronized. In this case,

select “MODE 1”.

•Select “MODE 1” if the sound is interrupted.

█Note on disc

• This system can play CD-R/RW with CD-DA or MP3

format content.

• Before playback, finalise the disc on the device it was

recorded on.

• Some CD-R/RW cannot be played because of the

condition of the recording.

█Note on USB device

• This system does not guarantee connection with all USB

devices.

• This system supports USB 2.0 full speed.

• This system can support USB devices of up to 32 GB.

• Only FAT 12/16/32 file system is supported.

█Note on MP3 file

• Files are defined as tracks and folders are defined as

albums.

• Tracks must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

• Tracks will not necessarily be played in the order you

recorded them.

• Some files can fail to work because of the sector size.

MP3 file on disc

• This system can access up to:

– 255 albums (including root folder)

– 999 tracks

– 20 sessions

• Disc must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for

extended formats).

MP3 file on USB device

• This system can access up to:

– 800 albums (including root folder)

– 8000 tracks

– 999 tracks in one album

Radio

Preparation

Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] to select “FM”.

Manual tuning

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select “TUNE

MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

To tune automatically, press and hold the button until

the frequency starts changing quickly.

“STEREO” is shown when a stereo broadcast is being

received.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “MANUAL”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

Memory presetting

You can preset up to 30 FM stations.

█Automatic presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “A.PRESET”.

2Press [R,T] to select “LOWEST” or “CURRENT”

and then press [OK].

The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the

channels in ascending order.

To cancel, press [8].

█Manual presetting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MANUAL” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to tune in to the

station.

4Press [OK].

5Press [R,T] to select a preset number and then

press [OK].

Do steps 3 through 5 again to preset more stations.

The new station replaces any station that occupies the

same preset number.

█Selecting a preset station

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“TUNE MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “PRESET” and then press

[OK].

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Using the unit

1Press [8] to select “PRESET”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the preset

station.

Improving the sound quality

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“FM MODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select “MONO” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “STEREO”.

“MONO” is also cancelled when you change the

frequency.

To memorise the setting

Continue with step 4 of “Manual presetting”.

CD :

USB :

BLUETOOTH :

CD-R/RW in CD-DA format or with MP3 files.

USB device with MP3 files.

Bluetooth® device.

Play Press [4/9].

Stop Press [8].

USB

The position is memorised.

“RESUME” is shown.

Press again to stop fully.

Pause Press [4/9].

Press again to continue playback.

Skip Press [2/3] or [5/6] to skip track.

CD USB

Press [R,T] to skip MP3 album.

Search Press and hold [2/3] or [5/6].

OFF

PLAYMODE

Cancel the setting.

1-TRACK

Play one selected track.

Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select

the track.

1-ALBUM

Play one selected MP3 album.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

RANDOM

RND

Play all tracks randomly.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

1 RND

Play all tracks in one selected MP3 album

randomly.

Press [R,T] to select the MP3 album.

ALL REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

1-TRACK

REPEAT

Repeat 1-TRACK.

1-ALBUM

REPEAT

Repeat 1-ALBUM.

RANDOM

REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

1-ALBUM

RANDOM

REPEAT

1 RND

Repeat 1-ALBUM RANDOM.

MODE 1 Emphasis on connectivity.

MODE 2

(default)

Emphasis on sound quality.

Album

number

Track

number

LOWEST Tuning begins from the lowest

frequency.

CURRENT Tuning begins from the current

frequency.

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

Checking the signal status

Press [DISPLAY].

Illumination

You can switch on or switch off the illumination on the

system.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“ILLUMINATION”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

When dimmer function is switched on, the illumination on the

system will remain off although you have switch on the

illumination function.

Sound effects

Preset EQ

1Press [SOUND] to select “PRESET EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the desired preset EQ setting

and then press [OK].

Manual EQ

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MANUAL EQ”.

2Press [R,T] to select the sound effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

D.Bass

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “D.BASS” and

then press [R,T] to select “D.BASS LEVEL” or

“D.BASS BEAT”.

To cancel, select “OFF D.BASS”.

2Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

D.BASS BEAT: This function emphasises the attack level of the

drumbeat and produces a punchy sound. Depending on the

track, the effect may be small.

Jukebox

USB

You can use the jukebox to add a cross-fade effect

between songs. You can also use additional features with

the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app (Z below).

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “JUKEBOX”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Using the unit

Press [JUKEBOX] to select the setting.

Changing the repeat setting

1Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“PLAYMODE”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting and then press

[OK].

Note:

•The system switches to repeat mode automatically when you

switch on the jukebox.

•The jukebox is switched off when you switch off the system or

change to another source.

•The cross-fade function may not work between songs that

have different sampling frequencies.

Karaoke

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Select the music source.

Note:

The Karaoke function is switched off when you switch off the

system.

Changing the Karaoke effect

You can use the Karaoke effect function to add the sound

effects.

1Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “KARAOKE

EFFECT”.

2Press [R,T] to select the effect.

3Press [2/3] or [5/6] to select the setting

and then press [OK].

Note:

To use the Karaoke effect in D-IN or AUX source, set “D-IN

MODE” or “AUX MODE” to “MODE 1”. (Z“D-IN mode and AUX

mode”)

Using a microphone

Except for Australia and New Zealand

Preparation

Decrease the volume of the system to its minimum before

you connect or disconnect a microphone.

1Connect a microphone (not supplied) to the

microphone jack.

Plug type: Ø 6.3 mm monaural

2Press [SOUND] repeatedly to select “MIC VOL”.

3Press [R,T] to adjust the volume of the microphone

and then press [OK].

If you want to sing with the background music.

4Play the music source and adjust the volume of the

system.

Note:

•If a strange noise (howling) is emitted, move the microphone

away from the speakers, or decrease the volume of the

microphone.

•When you do not use the microphone, disconnect it from the

microphone jack, and decrease the volume of the

microphone to its minimum.

Clock and timers

Setting the clock

This is a 24-hour clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK”.

2Press [R,T] to set the time and then press [OK].

To check the time

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “CLOCK” and then

press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY].

Note:

Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

Sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the system after the set time.

1Press [SETUP] to select “SLEEP”.

2Press [R,T] to select the setting (in minutes) and

then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

•The remaining time is shown for a few seconds every minute.

“SLEEP 1” is always shown when only 1 minute remains.

•The sleep timer always comes first. Be sure not to set an

overlap of timers.

FM – – – – The FM signal is weak.

The system is not tuned in to a station.

FM ST The FM signal is in stereo.

FM MONO “MONO” is selected as the “FM MODE”.

The FM signal is in monaural.

BASS/MID/TREBLE –4 to +4

SURROUND “ON SURROUND” or

“OFF SURROUND”

OFF CROSSFADE Cancel cross-fading.

ON CROSSFADE Add cross-fading.

OFF Switch off the jukebox.

RANDOM REPEAT

RND

Repeat random playback.

ALL TITLE REPEAT Repeat all tracks.

Using the “Panasonic MAX Juke” app

You can download and install the free Android™ app

“Panasonic MAX Juke” on Google Play™ for additional

features, such as to request song playback from multiple

devices simultaneously. You can also call up the tracks

you want to play through the app. For details on the app,

refer to the site below.

http://av.jpn.support.panasonic.com/support/global/cs/

audio/app/max_juke/android/index.html

(This site is in English only.)

VOCAL CANCEL Switch on or switch off the voice

guide (depending on source).

ECHO Add echo effect to the sound.

KEY CONTROL Change the key of a song.

TEMPO CD USB

Change the speed of a song.

BGM Change the background music

level.

MIC EQ Select a MIC EQ level.

OFF Cancel the effect.

Rear panel

of this unit

Microphone

(not supplied)

Play timer

(Except for Bluetooth®, AUX and D-IN source)

You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake

you up.

Preparation

Set the clock.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ”.

2Press [R,T] to set the start time and then press

[OK].

3Do step 2 again to set the end time.

4Press [R,T] to select the source you want to play

and then press [OK].

To start the timer

1Prepare the source you want to listen to (disc, USB

or radio) and set the volume.

2Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER SET”.

3Press [R,T] to select “PLAY ON” and then press

[OK].

“#” is shown.

To cancel, select “PLAY OFF”.

The system must be switched off for the timer to

operate.

To check the setting

Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “TIMER ADJ” and

then press [OK].

In standby mode, press [DISPLAY] two times.

Note:

•The timer starts at a low volume and increases gradually to

the preset level.

•The timer comes on at the set time every day if the timer is on.

•If you switch off the system and then switch on again while a

timer is in operation, the timer will not stop at the end time.

External equipment

Preparation

• Disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Switch off all equipment and read the appropriate

operating instructions.

Note:

•Components and cables are sold separately.

•Sound distortion can occur when you use an adapter.

•If you want to connect equipment other than those described,

refer to the audio dealer.

Using the optical input

You can connect a TV, VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to

the audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN”.

3Play the external equipment.

Note:

•This system can only detect linear PCM signals.

•Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

up to 96 kHz.

•The sound is muted if the signal format or frequency is not

supported.

•If there are sounds coming from the TV’s speakers, decrease

the volume of the TV to its minimum.

Using the auxiliary input

You can connect a VCR, DVD player etc. and listen to the

audio through this system.

1Connect the external equipment.

2Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “AUX”.

3Play the external equipment.

To adjust the input level

1Press [PLAY MENU] to select “INPUT LEVEL”.

2Press [R,T] to select “NORMAL” or “HIGH” and

then press [OK].

Note:

Select “NORMAL” if the sound is distorted during “HIGH” input

level.

D-IN mode and AUX mode

Except for Australia and New Zealand

1Press [RADIO/EXT-IN] repeatedly to select “D-IN” or

“AUX”.

2Press [PLAY MENU] repeatedly to select

“D-IN MODE” or “AUX MODE”.

3Press [R,T] to select the mode and then press

[OK].

Others

Auto off

This system automatically switches off when you do not

use it for approximately 20 minutes.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “AUTO OFF”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

This function does not work when you are in radio source or

when a Bluetooth® device is connected.

Bluetooth® standby

This function automatically switches on the system when

you establish a Bluetooth® connection from a paired device.

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select

“BLUETOOTH STANDBY”.

2Press [R,T] to select “ON” and then press [OK].

To cancel, select “OFF”.

Note:

Some devices may take longer to respond. If you are connected

to a Bluetooth® device before switching off the system, wait for a

minimum of 5 seconds before connecting to this system from

your Bluetooth® device again.

Software update

Occasionally, Panasonic may release updated software for

this unit that may add or improve the way a feature

operates. These updates are available free of charge. For

more details, refer to the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

█Checking the software version

1Press [SETUP] repeatedly to select “SW VER.” and

then press [OK].

The software version is shown.

2Press [OK] again to exit.

Rear panel

of this unit Optical digital audio

cable (not supplied)

TV (not supplied)

MODE 1

(default)

Select this mode to use the Karaoke

effect function.

MODE 2 Select this mode when watching TV,

movies or using an external player with

Karaoke features.

Rear panel

of this unit

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVD player

(not supplied)

UA3GN.GS_TQBJ2013_en.fm Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2017 4:37 PM

A2_2pc.indd 2 4/20/17 4:49:49 PM

offset printing

Other manuals for SC-UA3

Table of contents

Other Panasonic Stereo System manuals

Panasonic

Panasonic SCHC28 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SA-MAX8000GN User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SA-MAX9000 Series User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SA-AKX34PH User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-VK650 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-HC55DB User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic MW10 - 9.0" - Digital Photo frame User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-UX100 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-HT290 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-HC412 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SCPM20 - CD STEREO SYSTEM User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-EN36 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-HC200 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic RX-CT900 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SAAK200 - MINI-HES/W CD PLAYER Quick start guide

Panasonic

Panasonic SCHT744 - RECEIVER User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-PM04 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-PM28 User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SA-PM250EB User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SA-PM3E User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SA-AKX52PH User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic RXD13 - RADIO CASS. W/CD-LOW User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SA-AK785LM-K User manual

Panasonic

Panasonic SC-MAX770 User manual

Popular Stereo System manuals by other brands

Sanyo

Sanyo DC-D9 Service manual

Roadstar

Roadstar RCR-4650USMP instruction manual

AEG

AEG MC 4409 CD/MP3 Instruction manual & guarantee

SONIQ

SONIQ HB413 instruction manual

Emerson

Emerson MS9700 owner's manual

Sharp

Sharp CD-SW300H Operation manual

Bosch

Bosch Praesideo 3.5 Installation and user instructions

Noxon

Noxon NOVA II user manual

Sharp

Sharp XL-T300H quick guide

ALCHEMIST

ALCHEMIST Product 8 Transport instruction manual

Subpac

Subpac M2X manual

Sony

Sony ZS-BTG905 operating instructions

RCA

RCA RS2531 user guide

Philips

Philips FWM139 Specifications

Sony

Sony SRS-X7 manual

Hitachi

Hitachi FX-10 Service manual

Sony

Sony SRS-X2 quick start guide

Philips

Philips FW-C80/22 user manual

Panasonic SC-UA3 User manual

Popular Stereo System manuals by other brands